<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Davenpoj</id>
		<title>Help Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Davenpoj"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Davenpoj"/>
		<updated>2026-07-01T12:32:53Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.26.3</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26190</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26190"/>
				<updated>2015-08-19T22:11:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Operational */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust each of the exposure settings: ISO, aperture, shutter speed, with any method(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.&lt;br /&gt;
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and navigate the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate the different exposure modes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate through the MENU.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Detach/Attach the battery grip.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Attach an ND filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26091</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26091"/>
				<updated>2015-08-10T22:40:50Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Written ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus? How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operational ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust each of the exposure settings: ISO, aperture, shutter speed, with any method(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.&lt;br /&gt;
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and navigate the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate the different exposure modes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate through the MENU.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Detach/Attach the battery grip.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Attach an ND filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26090</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=26090"/>
				<updated>2015-08-10T22:36:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: Created page with &amp;quot;  Category:Media Loan&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26063</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26063"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:30:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash front.png|300px|thumb|front]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash back.png|300px|thumb|back]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''To use:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To remove: press the lock release button and push the level to the left.  This will release the flash and you can pull it out of the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26062</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26062"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:26:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash front.png|300px|thumb|front]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash back.png|300px|thumb|back]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''To use:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26061</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26061"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:25:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash front.png|300px|thumb|left|front]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash back.png|300px|thumb|back]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
'''To use:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_front.png&amp;diff=26060</id>
		<title>File:Flash front.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_front.png&amp;diff=26060"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:18:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: Davenpoj uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:Flash front.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_front.png&amp;diff=26059</id>
		<title>File:Flash front.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_front.png&amp;diff=26059"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:17:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_back.png&amp;diff=26058</id>
		<title>File:Flash back.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Flash_back.png&amp;diff=26058"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:17:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26057</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26057"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:14:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
'''To use:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26056</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26056"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:14:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
To use: &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26055</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26055"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:14:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
To use: &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place. &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26054</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26054"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:13:50Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Basic Operation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
1. Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
2. On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26053</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26053"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:12:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Zoom */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:''' &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26052</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26052"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:11:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Other features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other features===&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Access the full guides here:'''&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26051</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26051"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:11:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Access the full guides here: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other features==&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Access the full guides here:====&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26050</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26050"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:11:09Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Access the full guides here: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other features==&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Access the full guides here:====&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26049</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26049"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T20:10:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Other features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other features==&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Access the full guides here:====&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II &lt;br /&gt;
http://www.the-digital-picture.com/Owners-Manuals/Canon-Speedlite-430ex-Flash-Manual.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II &lt;br /&gt;
http://mfaphoto.schoolofvisualarts.edu/pdfs/manuals/Canon_Speedlite%20580EXii_Flash.PDF&lt;br /&gt;
http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26048</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26048"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T19:38:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Other features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other features==&lt;br /&gt;
====C.Fn.====&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  These can be adjusted in the Rebel's menu under &amp;quot;Flash Control&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;External flash C.fn setting&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
Use this button to set the desired flash mode (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
====High-Speed Sync====&lt;br /&gt;
This enables the flash to synchronize with all shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to use aperture priority for fill-in portraits.&lt;br /&gt;
====Zoom====&lt;br /&gt;
The flash coverage can be set to match the lens focal length. This can be set manually, press the &amp;quot;ZOOM&amp;quot; button and use the dial to adjust.  480EX II adjusts from 24-105mm, and the 580EX II adjusts from 28mm-105mm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II -http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II -http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26047</id>
		<title>Canon Speedlite Flashes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Speedlite_Flashes&amp;diff=26047"/>
				<updated>2015-07-31T19:19:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan offers two stand-alone speedlite flashes, the 430EX II and 580EX II.  These do not require a proficiency and are checked out separately, unlike the Speedlite Kit offered at Media Loan, and work with all Canon Rebel cameras.  These are multi-feature flash units for Canon EOS cameras and work automatically with E-TTL II, E-TTL, and TTL autoflash systems. They both can be used as on-camera flashes and as part of a wireless, multi-Speedlite flash systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Operation==&lt;br /&gt;
To use:&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the flash to the camera by inserting it into the hot shoe mount on top.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the mounting foot, slide the lock lever to the right until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
# Flip the switch to &amp;quot;on&amp;quot;. The &amp;quot;pilot&amp;quot; indicator should light up red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flashes normally automatically sync up with Rebels.  If not, you can adjust the mode on the flash itself as well as on the camera's menu under &amp;quot;flash control&amp;quot;.  Here you can enable/disable flash firing as well as set up which type of flash mode you want to use (E-TTL II, Manual, Multi).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other features==&lt;br /&gt;
Custom functions can be set up on these speedlites.  Exposure compensation can also be adjusted on the flash itself by pressing the &amp;quot;SET/SEL&amp;quot; button and turning the wheel to the dial to the desired setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
430EX II -http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_Speedlite430EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
580EX II -http://learn.usa.canon.com/app/pdfs/quickguides/CDLC_580EXII_QuickGuide.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sony_PD-150/170_3CCD_Mini_DVCAM_Camcorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=25995</id>
		<title>Sony PD-150/170 3CCD Mini DVCAM Camcorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sony_PD-150/170_3CCD_Mini_DVCAM_Camcorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=25995"/>
				<updated>2015-07-10T19:11:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Adjusting Sound Levels Manually */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''A proficiency test is required to check these cameras out'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Precautions===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Avoid mechanical shock&lt;br /&gt;
:* Keep camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration&lt;br /&gt;
:* Keep Power switch set to off when not in use&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not get wet or use near water&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not aim at the sun or other bright objects&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not expose camcorder to extreme temperatures&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not leave unattended (remember borrower is totally responsible for loss or damage)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not touch lens surface&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not try to clean viewfinder or LCD panel&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not lift or carry by viewfinder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not wrap up the camcorder and use, to prevent internal heat buildup&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not force camera to accept tape make sure that there are no protruding labels on the tape.&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:left.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp2.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Supplying Power====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Battery Pack=====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift up the Viewfinder and insert the battery pack with the downward arrow on the battery pack facing down. Slide the battery pack down until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AC Adapter=====&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet, then connect the camcorder and the AC power adapter using the supplied cord.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Charging the Battery=====&lt;br /&gt;
Supply power with the AC adapter while the battery is inserted, and leave the '''POWER''' switch set to '''OFF'''&lt;br /&gt;
Approximate charging time for full battery: Normal battery 2.5 hours, Extended life battery 6.5 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
====Cassette Insertion====&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the camcorder to a power source and slide the '''EJECT''' button. the cassette compartment automatically opens. Insert a cassette with the write-protect tab facing upward and the window facing out, and gently press the '''PUSH''' button on the outside of the compartment until the door clicks shut.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''NOTE:''' Use only DVCAM or Mini DV cassettes.&lt;br /&gt;
====Record Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
The PD 150/170 are capable of recording in both DVCAM and DVSP modes. While Evergreen supports both, other cameras do not. So if you plan on using a tape between this and any other cameras use DVSP mode.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
First remove the hood cap. While pressing the green center button on the '''POWER''' switch. set it to '''CAMERA'''. Press the red '''START/STOP''' button to start recording. The '''REC''' indicator appears in the viewfinder and the red lamp indicator lights up in the front of the camcorder. Press the '''START/STOP''' button again to stop recording.&lt;br /&gt;
====Manual Adjustments====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:autolock.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp4.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:p2.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp3.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:leftp3.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:leftp4.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For Iris, Shutter Speed, Gain and White Balance you must use the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch in the manual position.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AUTO LOCK Selection=====&lt;br /&gt;
: A. Fully automatic settings.&lt;br /&gt;
: B. Manual position, allows user to manually adjust settings.&lt;br /&gt;
: C. Hold, maintain settings made manually.&lt;br /&gt;
=====IRIS (Aperture)=====&lt;br /&gt;
The Iris setting is to adjust depth of field and exposure. To adjust aperture make sure the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch is in the manual position the press '''IRIS''' and an indicator will appear on the viewfinder. Turn the '''IRIS''' dial to adjust aperture. To return to '''AUTO IRIS''', either set '''AUTO LOCK''' to '''AUTO''' or press '''IRIS'''&lt;br /&gt;
=====Shutter Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to the manual position. if the '''PROGRAM AE''' indicator is lit in the viewfinder, press the '''PROGRAM AE''' button repeatedly until the indicator disappears. Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button. the shutter speed indicator appears in the viewfinder. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select the desired speed. the shutter speed ranges from 1/4 to 1/10000 of a second. To return to automatic shutter speed mode, set the '''AUTO LOCK''' selector to '''AUTO LOCK''', or press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button. The shutter speed indicator disappears from the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': Slow shutter speeds require manual focus, and you can not use spotlight or digital effects with speeds less the 1/30th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Gain=====&lt;br /&gt;
To adjust gain set '''AUTO LOCK''' to the manual position and press '''GAIN''', gain indicator should appear in the viewfinder. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the gain to the desired setting. To return to '''AUTO''' gain set the '''AUTO LOCK''' to ''' AUTO''' or press '''GAIN''' and the indicator should disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Adjusting White Balance=====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to the center position. Press the '''WHT BAL''' button, the white balance indicator appears in the viewfinder. Use the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to the appropriate white balance mode: One-push (manual calibration), outdoor, or indoor. To use one-push manual adjustment mode the camera must be in standby. Fill the frame with a white object such as paper, and press '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. the indicator flashes rapidly, to indicate storage of the new white balance setting. The indicator stops flashing when white balance has been adjusted. To return to automatic adjustment, set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to '''AUTO LOCK''' or press the '''WHY BAL''' button. the indicator disappears from the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Auto Exposure (AE) Shift=====&lt;br /&gt;
To adjust exposure while using auto exposure, press the '''AE SHIFT''' button in standby, while recording or memory mode. the '''AE SHIFT''' indicator will appear on screen. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the exposure. To turn '''AE SHIFT''' off, set it to 0 or press '''AE SHIFT'''.&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Fader/Overlap Function====&lt;br /&gt;
=====To Fade In=====&lt;br /&gt;
While in Standby, press the '''FADER''' button until the desired fader indicator flashes in the viewfinder. Press the '''START/STOP''' button; the shot will automatically fade in.&lt;br /&gt;
=====To Fade Out=====&lt;br /&gt;
While recording, press the '''FADER''' button repeatedly until the desired fader mode flashes in the Viewfinder. Press '''START/STOP''' button; the shot will automatically fade out.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After the fade is completed, the camcorder returns to normal mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fade modes are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
Fader, Monotone, Overlap*, Wipe*, Dot*, none&lt;br /&gt;
::: * Fade in only&lt;br /&gt;
====Manual Focus====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''FOCUS''' switch to '''MANUAL'''. Rotate the '''FOCUS RING''' to adjust focus. Press the '''PUSH AUTO''' button to auto focus momentarily.&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the ND Filter====&lt;br /&gt;
The Neutral Density Filter can allow you to shoot clearly even under too bright conditions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ND Filter settings 1 corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light, ND Filter setting 2 corresponds to 1/32. It is recommended that you set the ND Filter in standby mode, as it can cause audio and video noise during recording.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''ND1''' and '''ND2''' indicator flashes in the viewfinder, set the '''ND FILTER''' switch to corresponding setting. When the '''ND OFF''' indicator flashes in the viewfinder, the filter is not necessary. Set the '''ND FILTER''' switch to off.&lt;br /&gt;
===Adjusting Sound Levels Manually===&lt;br /&gt;
Sound levels are set automatically by default.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button and turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select the '''TAPE SET''' menu, then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH''' dial to '''MIC LEVEL''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''MANUAL''' then press the dial. Press the '''MENU''' button to close the menu. Press the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' button to display the recording level adjustment display. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the recording level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''AUDIO SET''' is the automatic mic level mode.  If you want to manually change the mic level, turn this off on the channel you're using.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resetting Sound Levels to Auto====&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button and turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the '''TAPE SET''' menu, then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to '''MIC LEVEL''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''AUTO''' and press the dial again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Releasing Steadyshot===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''CAMERA SET''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''STEADYSHOT''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''OFF''' then press the dial. press the '''MENU''' button to close the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''POWER''' switch to '''CAMERA'''. Then press the '''PHOTO''' button lightly until a still picture appears in the viewfinder. To change the still picture, release the '''PHOTO''' button and repeat. Press the '''PHOTO''' button deeper, the still image and sound are recorded for seven seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': These camera are '''NOT RECOMMENDED''' for taking photos. See Media Loan about digital still cameras if this is your intended purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE on ANIMATING''': While the PD 150/170 is capable of some animation techniques, we highly recommend using the '''ANIMAC''' instead.&lt;br /&gt;
===Fram by Frame Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
To make a stop-motion animated effect you must use cut recording. Press '''MENU''' in standby mode and select the camera icon with a '''C''' in it. Select '''FRAME REC''' and select '''ON'''. Press '''MENU''' to leave the menu display and '''FRAME REC''' indicator should light. Press '''START/STOP''' to record an image, the camera will record an image about six frames long and then returns to standby mode. To cancel set '''FRAME REC''' to '''OFF''' in the menu and set the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF''', '''VCR''', or '''MEMORY'''.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': The last recorded cut is longer than others, the proper remaining tape time will not be accurate and you cannot mark an index while using frame by frame.&lt;br /&gt;
===Interval Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
Time Lapse recording is possible by using the Interval recording ('''INT REC''') feature on the camera. Press '''MENU''' in standby mode and select the '''C''' camera icon. Select '''INT REC''' then '''SET'''. Set the '''INTERVAL''' and '''REC''' times individually. '''INTERVAL''' is the time period when the camera is in standby between recordings. Select '''INTERVAL''' and choose the desired time (between 30 secs and 10 minutes). Now select the '''REC''' time by selecting '''REC''' in the menu (between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds). Turn the dial to select '''RETURN''' and select '''ON''' to turn on '''INT REC'''. An '''INT REC''' indicator should flash. Press '''START/STOP''' to begin recording and the indicator will stay on. To cancel '''INT REC''', set it to '''OFF''' in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sony_PD-150/170_3CCD_Mini_DVCAM_Camcorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=25994</id>
		<title>Sony PD-150/170 3CCD Mini DVCAM Camcorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sony_PD-150/170_3CCD_Mini_DVCAM_Camcorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=25994"/>
				<updated>2015-07-10T19:11:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Adjusting Sound Levels Manually */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''A proficiency test is required to check these cameras out'''&lt;br /&gt;
===Precautions===&lt;br /&gt;
:* Avoid mechanical shock&lt;br /&gt;
:* Keep camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration&lt;br /&gt;
:* Keep Power switch set to off when not in use&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not get wet or use near water&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not aim at the sun or other bright objects&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not expose camcorder to extreme temperatures&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not leave unattended (remember borrower is totally responsible for loss or damage)&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not touch lens surface&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not try to clean viewfinder or LCD panel&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not lift or carry by viewfinder&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not wrap up the camcorder and use, to prevent internal heat buildup&lt;br /&gt;
:* Do not force camera to accept tape make sure that there are no protruding labels on the tape.&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic Operation===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:left.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp2.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Supplying Power====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Battery Pack=====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift up the Viewfinder and insert the battery pack with the downward arrow on the battery pack facing down. Slide the battery pack down until it clicks into place.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AC Adapter=====&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet, then connect the camcorder and the AC power adapter using the supplied cord.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Charging the Battery=====&lt;br /&gt;
Supply power with the AC adapter while the battery is inserted, and leave the '''POWER''' switch set to '''OFF'''&lt;br /&gt;
Approximate charging time for full battery: Normal battery 2.5 hours, Extended life battery 6.5 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
====Cassette Insertion====&lt;br /&gt;
Connect the camcorder to a power source and slide the '''EJECT''' button. the cassette compartment automatically opens. Insert a cassette with the write-protect tab facing upward and the window facing out, and gently press the '''PUSH''' button on the outside of the compartment until the door clicks shut.&lt;br /&gt;
:'''NOTE:''' Use only DVCAM or Mini DV cassettes.&lt;br /&gt;
====Record Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
The PD 150/170 are capable of recording in both DVCAM and DVSP modes. While Evergreen supports both, other cameras do not. So if you plan on using a tape between this and any other cameras use DVSP mode.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
First remove the hood cap. While pressing the green center button on the '''POWER''' switch. set it to '''CAMERA'''. Press the red '''START/STOP''' button to start recording. The '''REC''' indicator appears in the viewfinder and the red lamp indicator lights up in the front of the camcorder. Press the '''START/STOP''' button again to stop recording.&lt;br /&gt;
====Manual Adjustments====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:autolock.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp4.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:p2.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:backp3.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:leftp3.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:leftp4.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For Iris, Shutter Speed, Gain and White Balance you must use the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch in the manual position.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AUTO LOCK Selection=====&lt;br /&gt;
: A. Fully automatic settings.&lt;br /&gt;
: B. Manual position, allows user to manually adjust settings.&lt;br /&gt;
: C. Hold, maintain settings made manually.&lt;br /&gt;
=====IRIS (Aperture)=====&lt;br /&gt;
The Iris setting is to adjust depth of field and exposure. To adjust aperture make sure the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch is in the manual position the press '''IRIS''' and an indicator will appear on the viewfinder. Turn the '''IRIS''' dial to adjust aperture. To return to '''AUTO IRIS''', either set '''AUTO LOCK''' to '''AUTO''' or press '''IRIS'''&lt;br /&gt;
=====Shutter Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to the manual position. if the '''PROGRAM AE''' indicator is lit in the viewfinder, press the '''PROGRAM AE''' button repeatedly until the indicator disappears. Press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button. the shutter speed indicator appears in the viewfinder. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select the desired speed. the shutter speed ranges from 1/4 to 1/10000 of a second. To return to automatic shutter speed mode, set the '''AUTO LOCK''' selector to '''AUTO LOCK''', or press the '''SHUTTER SPEED''' button. The shutter speed indicator disappears from the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': Slow shutter speeds require manual focus, and you can not use spotlight or digital effects with speeds less the 1/30th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Gain=====&lt;br /&gt;
To adjust gain set '''AUTO LOCK''' to the manual position and press '''GAIN''', gain indicator should appear in the viewfinder. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the gain to the desired setting. To return to '''AUTO''' gain set the '''AUTO LOCK''' to ''' AUTO''' or press '''GAIN''' and the indicator should disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Adjusting White Balance=====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to the center position. Press the '''WHT BAL''' button, the white balance indicator appears in the viewfinder. Use the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to the appropriate white balance mode: One-push (manual calibration), outdoor, or indoor. To use one-push manual adjustment mode the camera must be in standby. Fill the frame with a white object such as paper, and press '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial. the indicator flashes rapidly, to indicate storage of the new white balance setting. The indicator stops flashing when white balance has been adjusted. To return to automatic adjustment, set the '''AUTO LOCK''' switch to '''AUTO LOCK''' or press the '''WHY BAL''' button. the indicator disappears from the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Auto Exposure (AE) Shift=====&lt;br /&gt;
To adjust exposure while using auto exposure, press the '''AE SHIFT''' button in standby, while recording or memory mode. the '''AE SHIFT''' indicator will appear on screen. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the exposure. To turn '''AE SHIFT''' off, set it to 0 or press '''AE SHIFT'''.&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the Fader/Overlap Function====&lt;br /&gt;
=====To Fade In=====&lt;br /&gt;
While in Standby, press the '''FADER''' button until the desired fader indicator flashes in the viewfinder. Press the '''START/STOP''' button; the shot will automatically fade in.&lt;br /&gt;
=====To Fade Out=====&lt;br /&gt;
While recording, press the '''FADER''' button repeatedly until the desired fader mode flashes in the Viewfinder. Press '''START/STOP''' button; the shot will automatically fade out.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After the fade is completed, the camcorder returns to normal mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The fade modes are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
Fader, Monotone, Overlap*, Wipe*, Dot*, none&lt;br /&gt;
::: * Fade in only&lt;br /&gt;
====Manual Focus====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''FOCUS''' switch to '''MANUAL'''. Rotate the '''FOCUS RING''' to adjust focus. Press the '''PUSH AUTO''' button to auto focus momentarily.&lt;br /&gt;
====Using the ND Filter====&lt;br /&gt;
The Neutral Density Filter can allow you to shoot clearly even under too bright conditions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ND Filter settings 1 corresponds to 1/4 of the quantity of light, ND Filter setting 2 corresponds to 1/32. It is recommended that you set the ND Filter in standby mode, as it can cause audio and video noise during recording.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''ND1''' and '''ND2''' indicator flashes in the viewfinder, set the '''ND FILTER''' switch to corresponding setting. When the '''ND OFF''' indicator flashes in the viewfinder, the filter is not necessary. Set the '''ND FILTER''' switch to off.&lt;br /&gt;
===Adjusting Sound Levels Manually===&lt;br /&gt;
Sound levels are set automatically by default.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button and turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select the '''TAPE SET''' menu, then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH''' dial to '''MIC LEVEL''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''MANUAL''' then press the dial. Press the '''MENU''' button to close the menu. Press the '''AUDIO LEVEL''' button to display the recording level adjustment display. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to adjust the recording level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AUDIO SET is the automatic mic level mode.  If you want to manually change the mic level, turn this off on the channel you're using.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Resetting Sound Levels to Auto====&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button and turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the '''TAPE SET''' menu, then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to '''MIC LEVEL''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''AUTO''' and press the dial again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Releasing Steadyshot===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the '''MENU''' button. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''CAMERA SET''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''STEADYSHOT''' then press the dial. Turn the '''SEL/PUSH EXEC''' dial to select '''OFF''' then press the dial. press the '''MENU''' button to close the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the '''POWER''' switch to '''CAMERA'''. Then press the '''PHOTO''' button lightly until a still picture appears in the viewfinder. To change the still picture, release the '''PHOTO''' button and repeat. Press the '''PHOTO''' button deeper, the still image and sound are recorded for seven seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': These camera are '''NOT RECOMMENDED''' for taking photos. See Media Loan about digital still cameras if this is your intended purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE on ANIMATING''': While the PD 150/170 is capable of some animation techniques, we highly recommend using the '''ANIMAC''' instead.&lt;br /&gt;
===Fram by Frame Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
To make a stop-motion animated effect you must use cut recording. Press '''MENU''' in standby mode and select the camera icon with a '''C''' in it. Select '''FRAME REC''' and select '''ON'''. Press '''MENU''' to leave the menu display and '''FRAME REC''' indicator should light. Press '''START/STOP''' to record an image, the camera will record an image about six frames long and then returns to standby mode. To cancel set '''FRAME REC''' to '''OFF''' in the menu and set the '''POWER''' switch to '''OFF''', '''VCR''', or '''MEMORY'''.&lt;br /&gt;
: '''NOTE''': The last recorded cut is longer than others, the proper remaining tape time will not be accurate and you cannot mark an index while using frame by frame.&lt;br /&gt;
===Interval Recording===&lt;br /&gt;
Time Lapse recording is possible by using the Interval recording ('''INT REC''') feature on the camera. Press '''MENU''' in standby mode and select the '''C''' camera icon. Select '''INT REC''' then '''SET'''. Set the '''INTERVAL''' and '''REC''' times individually. '''INTERVAL''' is the time period when the camera is in standby between recordings. Select '''INTERVAL''' and choose the desired time (between 30 secs and 10 minutes). Now select the '''REC''' time by selecting '''REC''' in the menu (between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds). Turn the dial to select '''RETURN''' and select '''ON''' to turn on '''INT REC'''. An '''INT REC''' indicator should flash. Press '''START/STOP''' to begin recording and the indicator will stay on. To cancel '''INT REC''', set it to '''OFF''' in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25986</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25986"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:39:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
* 3x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x  24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 85mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x plug in power supply &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25985</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25985"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:39:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
* 3x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x  24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 85mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x plug in power supply &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25984</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25984"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:34:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 3x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25983</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25983"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:33:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25982</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25982"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:33:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25981</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25981"/>
				<updated>2015-07-02T16:33:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25980</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25980"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T22:28:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* REMOTE (GA Kit) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25979</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25979"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T22:07:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust each of the exposure settings: ISO, aperture, shutter speed, with any method(s).&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.&lt;br /&gt;
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and navigate the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate the different exposure modes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Navigate through the MENU.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Detach/Attach the battery grip.&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Attach an ND filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25978</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25978"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:58:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25977</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25977"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:58:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25976</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25976"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:57:11Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* REMOTE (GA Kit) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote.  Make sure the drive/shooting mode on the camera is set to single before using the remote. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired shooting mode on the remote itself.  Single, burst, and timer shooting modes on the remote are accessible in every exposure mode on the camera except BULB.   The BULB function on the remote can only be utilized when the exposure mode on the camera is set to BULB (B).&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25975</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25975"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:55:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* REMOTE (GA Kit) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote.  Make sure the drive/shooting mode on the camera is set to single before using the remote. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired shooting mode on the remote itself.  Single, burst, and timer shooting modes on the remote are accessible in every exposure mode on the camera except BULB.   The BULB function on the remote can only be utilized when the exposure mode on the camera is set to BULB (B).&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25974</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25974"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:52:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Firmware version */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REMOTE (GA Kit)&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired shooting mode on the remote itself.  Single, burst, and timer shooting modes on the remote are accessible in every exposure mode on the camera except BULB.   The BULB function on the remote can only be utilized when the exposure mode on the camera is set to BULB (B).&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25973</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25973"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:34:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Master Controls */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25972</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25972"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:31:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* TOP FRONT DIAL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP MAIN DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25971</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25971"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:29:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Quick Exposure Settings Guide */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25970</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25970"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:26:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Quick Exposure Settings Guide */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25969</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25969"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:25:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* FRONT CONTROLS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Exposure Settings Guide&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top left display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25968</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25968"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:12:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Start/Stop (Live View) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Start/Stop (Live View)===&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25967</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25967"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:11:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Photo/Video Lever */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Photo/Video Lever===&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Start/Stop (Live View)====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25966</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25966"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T21:08:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* REAR CONTROLS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
====Photo/Video Lever====&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. &lt;br /&gt;
====Start/Stop (Live View)====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25965</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25965"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:28:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig&lt;br /&gt;
# (GA) Set-up the remote&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25964</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25964"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:22:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Exposure Mode (Top left knob) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===EXPOSURE MODE (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Movies and Live View===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movies====&lt;br /&gt;
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25963</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25963"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:21:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Top Front Dial */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TOP FRONT DIAL===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Movies and Live View===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movies====&lt;br /&gt;
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25962</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25962"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:21:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* Metering */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top Front Dial===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===METERING===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Movies and Live View===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movies====&lt;br /&gt;
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25961</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25961"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:12:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top Front Dial===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===Metering===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Movies and Live View===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movies====&lt;br /&gt;
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25960</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=25960"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:11:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: /* INTRODUCTION */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront2.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dfront.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dtop.jpg &lt;br /&gt;
File:Canon6Dback.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;INTRODUCTION&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are manual and prime. They include: &lt;br /&gt;
* a shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x f/1.5 24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
*1x 85mm cine lenses with geared aperture and focus rings. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable Neutral Density Filters to allow for using slow shutter speeds and wider apertures in brightly lit areas. &lt;br /&gt;
* 2x batteries and a plug in power supply for the camera. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;CARING FOR THE CANON 6D&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Point camera toward Sun.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;FRONT CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens release button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;TOP CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dtop.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
====Program Exposure Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, the 6D picks the perfect combination of aperture and shutter speed all by itself, and if you want to change them, all you need to do is move the front dial, and the 6D magically selects different combinations that still give the same exposure. In Program, also called Professional, mode, there's no need for other modes since turning the top front dial gets you right to whatever other aperture or shutter speed you might want with a minimum of fuss. Some of the menu options explained throughout this guide are deactivated in anything other than the P, Tv and Av modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Top Front Dial===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF MODE===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto/Manual Focus Switch====&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with this switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
====Autofocus Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the various autofocus modes, press the AF button on the top, and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
=====ONE SHOT=====&lt;br /&gt;
In ONE SHOT, the AF system focuses once, then locks so you can recompose if needed. Use this for photos of things that hold still&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI FOCUS=====&lt;br /&gt;
AI FOCUS automatically selects between ONE SHOT and AI SERVO. In AI FOCUS, the 6D looks at the subject, and if it holds still, locks focus as if it was set to ONE SHOT, and it it's moving, tracks it, as if it was set to AI SERVO. Use AI FOCUS most of the time, since it automatically selects what it needs to do.&lt;br /&gt;
=====AI SERVO=====&lt;br /&gt;
In AI SERVO, the 6D continuously tracks the subject. The AF system is always focusing in and out as the subject moves around. Use AI SERVO for sports or action shots of anything that's moving.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, selected in the C.Fn. menu. Even in its default setting, it will focus the lens when pressed, but here's the clever part: if the focus has locked without using the AF-ON button, when you press and hold AF-ON it works as an AF lock, holding focus for you while you recompose or do whatever else is needed.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically. To select them, press the top right rear [-|-] button, and then make your selection with the Master Controls, and the top dial if you like. You can see the selection through the finder, or on the rear or top LCDs. Each works a little differently, but all make the same adjustments. If you make a selection that lights all the sensors (or reads &amp;quot;[    ] AF&amp;quot; on the top or finder LCD) then the 6D will select what sensors to use all by itself, usually the ones with the closest part of the subject under them. Letting the 6D pick (all lit) is helpful, and especially when you hand your 6D to a stranger to take your picture. The thumb controller has 9 positions, so you usually can select any AF point in just one push. You also can spin both of the dials to move your selection around. The center sensor is more sensitive than the others in dim light. If the other sensors aren't doing well in dim light, choose the center sensor and you'll be much happier.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Micro adjustment====&lt;br /&gt;
Don't touch this. It's in the C.Fn. II Menu. If you have to ask how to set it, then you'll probably make it worse if you fiddle with this. If you insist on playing with it, know that only about one lens in twenty needs any adjustment, and the results are only visible at very large apertures and only under certain conditions. When you do set it, the 6D is smart enough to recall different settings for different lenses as you set them, automatically. It's often even smart enough to recognize different samples of the same lens, and it can be set for both ends of zoom lenses individually. When setting it, use natural targets like trees. Do not use tilted flat targets, since the actual location of the AF sensors is never really exactly where they are marked in the finder. To set it, you need to make many, many test shots to arrive at a setting. Every shot varies a little from shot to shot; no AF system gives the same result for each shot. Make at least 5 shots at every distance, and try every distance, since the settings can vary by distance. It's marked a in units of ±20. Numbers marked - (towards the camera icon), moves the real focus closer to us, while the + numbers (towards the mountain icon) pushes it further away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRIVE===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press DRIVE and move the top dial. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
One shot at a time. This is best for careful still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle====&lt;br /&gt;
Shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down. This is best for sports and action.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, one shot at a time. This is great for shooting where you want to be quiet, it really does quiet the 6D with very little speed penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
====Bearded Rectangle S====&lt;br /&gt;
Silent mode, shoots continuously as long as the shutter is held down.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 10 second self timer. It's also the mode to make your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
====Remote and Clock 2====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the 2 second self timer. It also makes your 6D responsive to a wireless remote.&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO, pronounced &amp;quot;eye ess oh,&amp;quot; sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. To adjust these, press ISO and turn the top dial.  AUTO ISO can be set in much more detail in the menus. The only thing we set with this button is if we're using AUTO ISO or setting a fixed ISO value.&lt;br /&gt;
===Metering===&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot and circle====&lt;br /&gt;
In Evaluative metering, the 6D does all it can to give the best exposures it can. It looks all over the frame, tries to figure out what is your subject, and makes its best evaluation of what the exposure should be.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with circle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the older PARTIAL metering mode from the 1970s. In Partial, the meter measures mostly from the central area of the finder.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle with dot only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is SPOT mode from the 1980s. In Spot mode, the meter only measures from the selected AF spot. Spot metering is very difficult to use properly.&lt;br /&gt;
====Rectangle only====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the AVERAGE mode from the 1960s. In Average mode, the meter takes the entire frame into consideration, without applying any of the clever intelligence it does in EVALUATIVE.&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;REAR CONTROLS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canon6Dback.jpg|200px|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings.&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO Button===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. &lt;br /&gt;
====Artificial Horizon (two presses)====&lt;br /&gt;
This helps you level the 6D.&lt;br /&gt;
===Diopter Control===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Movies and Live View===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever as shown to the silver camera-rear (Live View) icon. Press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power, so I never use it. It's mostly a feature for people used to point-and-shoot cameras or iPhones.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movies====&lt;br /&gt;
To shoot movies, turn the lever down to the movie camera icon, and the rear screen lights up with your live image. Press START/STOP to start and stop the recording of your movie. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots. You set the resolution and a host of more things in the MOVIE menu, which only appears when this lever is set to MOVIES.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-ON Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
===AF-Area Mode Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
===Magnification Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
===Play Button===&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
===The Quick Control [Q] Button===&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===Master Controls===&lt;br /&gt;
These master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. The SET button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big rear dial. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The LOCK switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
===Delete Button===&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
===C1 and C2 Camera Memories===&lt;br /&gt;
Set these before you go out, and everything you'll need will be right at your fingertips all day or forever. Each time you turn the dial to C1 or C2, everything is reset to what was stored in that position. Feel free to change any settings as you shoot in C1 or C2. You won't erase what you saved. These changes will stay until the camera times-out, usually one minute (you can change that duration in the menus), and the next time you go to shoot, even if you had changed something, you're back at your saved settings. If you want to return to the saved settings more quickly, just move the dial to any other position and return.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Save a Suite of Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
To save a complete camera-state setting of your 6D:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the camera as you like below. Everything is saved, from exposure mode, autofocus settings, custom settings, LCD brightness, Picture Controls, white balance fine-tuning and everything.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; choose the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Permanent Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
# To change a stored setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the dial to that setting, C1 or C2. This recalls the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change something.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save the camera's current state back into that dial position: MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode(C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Register settings &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; carefully select the C1 or C2 position &amp;gt; OK &amp;gt; SET.&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the wrong C1 or C2, you will have overwritten the settings at that position.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Temporary Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Just change something as you would anywhere else. As soon as you select or re-select a C setting, or as soon as the camera goes to sleep and wakes up again, your originally saved C setting is recalled. The C settings are not altered unless you deliberately save something else into them as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
====To Make a Longer Change to a Stored Setting====&lt;br /&gt;
Let's not forget the usual P, Tv, Av and M positions. When you change one of them, they stay that way forever. The four of them together (P, Tv, Av and M ) are sort of like an unlocked C setting: every time you come back to them, they are as you left them, but if you change something while in them, they stay that way. If dealing with some weird light that requires odd White Balance settings, you may want to use the P, Tv, Av or M positions, and then if a different opportunity presents itself, flip into one of your C modes, and as soon as you click back into any of P, Tv, Av or M positions, you're where you left off.&lt;br /&gt;
====To have these settings update automatically====&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these settings remains unchanged until you save a different set of settings to that dial position. New on the 6D is that you can choose to have these settings automatically update as you change the settings, as Nikons do in their settings banks. Set this way (MENU &amp;gt; WRENCH •••• &amp;gt; Custom shooting mode (C1, C2) &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Auto update set. &amp;gt; SET &amp;gt; Enable), when you leave one setting, it will be as you left it when you return. This is handy for when you first get the camera as your preferences finalize, but I'd set it back to its default of fixed after you get comfortable. If you enable auto-updating, you'll hate yourself when you twist around all your settings for a one-of shot sometime, and just changed your favorite long-term setting. If you save the same thing to two locations and set &amp;quot;auto update,&amp;quot; they both update until you change something in just one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MENU SETTINGS&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
==Video Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two VIDEO menus: '''MOVIE •''' and '''MOVIE ••'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You get to these by turning the '''Live View''' lever down to the '''MOVIE''' icon, press '''MENU''' and click to the two movie camera icons to the right of the first four '''CAMERA''' icons.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting, and only appear when the 6D is in MOVIE mode. To get to the Live View menu, you do the same thing, but instead move the Live View lever up to the Live View icon, which then replaces these Movie menus with Live View menus.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These settings apply only to VIDEO shooting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Live View Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is set to '''ENABLE''' by default. Set it to '''DISABLE '''if you don't want Live View popping up if you hit the '''LIVE VIEW''' button by accident.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF Method====&lt;br /&gt;
This set how autofocus works, only while in Movies. &lt;br /&gt;
====Silent LV Shoot====&lt;br /&gt;
These are different ways to attempt to make the 6D work more quietly as you shoot. Try the different modes if you're curious.&lt;br /&gt;
====Metering Timer====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the light meter stays on.&lt;br /&gt;
===MOVIE ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Grid display====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to place a rectangular grid over the image on the rear LCD as a help in keeping the camera level.&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set resolution, frame rate and compression scheme. The higher the resolution or frame rate, or if you choose '''ALL-I''', the bigger your files. &lt;br /&gt;
====Resolution====&lt;br /&gt;
'''1920''' Choose 1920 (1,920 x 1,080) for subjects of nature, landscapes, cityscapes ,wildlife. theatrical release, and theatrical productions.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''1280''' Choose 1,280 (1,280 x 720) for sports video. It has smoother motion and is better if you want to convert it to slow motion later. Contrary to what Japanese makers pitch for selling TVs, 1,280/60 has the same resolution, and uses the same amount of data as 1,920/30. This is because 1,280/60 has higher temporal (time or motion resolution), while 1,920/30 has higher spatial (left-right/up-down) resolution instead. 1,280 is better for sports, and 1,920 is better for drama — each has the same total resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
====Frame Rates====&lt;br /&gt;
'''24''' Choose the [24] options for theatrical release. They are really 23.976 fps. Also choose them for movies that look like movies instead of just video. Another advantage of 23.976 is that it's easy to down-convert it later to NTSC and to PAL, from the same file.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''30 and 60''' Choose [30] or [60] for NTSC-based (American, Japan, Korea, etc.) TV release. It's really 29.97 progressive or 59.94 interlaced fps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''50''' Choose 50 for PAL-based (Europe, China, Australia, Russia etc.) TV release.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Compression Scheme====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. IPB video files take much less space because the video is stored taking advantage of the fact that most frames have a lot of repetition from one frame to the next. IPB is far more efficient than ALL-I because it takes advantage of often storing only the changes from one frame to the next, not needing to save all the data of every frame if parts of it were the same as the frame before. Since movies have frames that are pretty much the same from one instant to the next, IPB is a very efficient way of storing video that looks great.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use. ALL-I stores each and every frame individually and in its entirety, even if most of it was the same as the frame before. ALL-I takes no advantage of the fact that most frames are very similar to the frames that came before them. Stored as ALL-I, your file has to save all of every frame, even when the background and 90% of each frame is exactly the same as the frame before it. The only real technical reason for ALL-I is that each frame is separate, so if you need to cut out and use just three frames, that all three frames are available to cut-out and use separately, while in IPB recording, most recorded frames depend to some extent on the frames before and after them to define themselves. Even shot IPB, there are still a few I (individual) frames recorded every second, and editing software recreates the entire video stream from the I, P and B frames before you start to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
====Sound Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the recording level control. Leave it at AUTO, or you may set it manually. Here you also may select a low-cut (wind) filter, and an attenuator. The low-cut (wind) filter only applies with the built-in microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
====Time Code====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you professionals set-up time code to your preferences. You even can set drop frame or NDF.&lt;br /&gt;
====Video Snapshot====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a corny feature to create a series of video clips of a few seconds each. '''Ignore it.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wrench Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
There are four Wrench menus: '''WRENCH•''', '''WRENCH••''', '''WRENCH•••''', and '''WRENCH••••'''.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set them, press '''MENU''' and click left or right to the four orange wrench icons towards the top right of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •===&lt;br /&gt;
====Select folder====&lt;br /&gt;
Select Folder is where you select the folder to and from which we'd like to record and play. This menu is also where we can create new folders. New folders might be useful if you shoot two different things on the same card, and want to have them neatly sorted while they're still on the card.&lt;br /&gt;
====File numbering====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you keep your files numbered properly. By default (&amp;quot;Continuous&amp;quot;), the 6D keeps counting up. Auto Reset means that the 6D will start back at IMG_0001.jpg each time it gets a clean card on which to shoot. This is potentially a bad idea, since your computer will quickly fill with many files all named IMG_0012.jpg. Manual Reset forces the counter back to IMG_0001.jpg for the next shot.&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto rotate====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether or not the 6D flags your vertical shots, and whether or not the camera will rotate them when it plays them back. The 6D never actually rotates anything, it merely sets flags which are usually, but not always, recognized by most software when the images are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us format the memory card so we have the lowest possibility of losing images. Always format the card every time it is put it in the camera. Formatting ensures that any potential data corruption is repaired. You can shoot a long time without formatting and never get any errors, but if your files are important to you, regular formatting reduces the risks even further. Formatting also erases all your images on the card, so don't do this until your photos are somewhere else, and backed up in a second location as well. When the card is formatted, it's simply cleared. The old photos aren't actually erased, but the card is programmed to ignore them and record over them cleanly. If for some paranoid reason you want everything wiped off the card, the low-level format option actually does this. If you select this option, the 6D actually writes-over every bit so there is nothing left, period — but it takes a much longer time to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Auto Power Off====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets how long the camera stays on before shutting itself off automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====LCD brightness====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the LCD brightness. If shooting outdoors in the dark at night, it may help to turn it down below 4, otherwise the LCD is so relatively bright that it tends to make underexposed images look correctly exposed, leading us to make images that are too dark outside at night. &lt;br /&gt;
====LCD ON/OFF BTN====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets not the when the LCD, but more specifically when the Shooting Info display turns off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick Control Panel====&lt;br /&gt;
Set to its default of Remain on, it stays on even with the shutter pressed; set it to Shutter btn. and it turns off as we're ready to take the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
====Date/Time/Zone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the clock.&lt;br /&gt;
====Language====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets your language. If it sets to a language you can't understand, the only way to navigate back to this option and identify it is that it also has a cartoon icon of a man talking. Once set other than English, it won't say &amp;quot;Language.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
====GPS====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets which GPS does what. This is where we turn on the internal GPS, or set the 6D to talk to an external GPS. If we activate the internal GPS, we then are offered its set-up options. Look out, if the internal GPS is ON, batteries can run down faster even left idle.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Position Update Timing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This is how often it takes a fix. Set it to a shorter time and it updates more often, but also runs down your battery faster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH •••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
====Feature Guide====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets little tips to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
=====INFO Button Display Options=====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets what screens come up as you press the INFO button.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi====&lt;br /&gt;
This activates the Wi-Fi connection. It's OFF by default. When ON, you cannot shoot movies or connect via USB.&lt;br /&gt;
====Wi-Fi function====&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item is only available if Wi-Fi (above) is set to ON. This is where we set what we want the Wi-Fi to do. Play with this one to see what the various options do.&lt;br /&gt;
===WRENCH ••••===&lt;br /&gt;
====Sensor cleaning====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets when the sensor cleans itself. It also lets us make the sensor clean itself now.&lt;br /&gt;
====Battery info====&lt;br /&gt;
This reads your battery charge to its exact percentage, tells you your battery's health with three green dots (or not), and how many shots this battery has made on this charge so far. If you know algebra, it's easy to predict how many shots are left on this charge and how many total shots you might get on the charge.&lt;br /&gt;
====Certification logo display====&lt;br /&gt;
This shows some more of the organizations to which Canon has certified that the 6D meets their standards for whatever they're testing.&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom Shooting Mode====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you set the C1 and C2 positions of the top mode dial.&lt;br /&gt;
====Clear all camera settings====&lt;br /&gt;
This is where to reset everything back to their factory settings.&lt;br /&gt;
====Copyright information====&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where we program our 6D to record all our personal and copyright information into the EXIF data of every file. Follow the menus; it's easier to do than it is to explain.&lt;br /&gt;
====Firmware version====&lt;br /&gt;
This lets us check our current firmware version, and here is where we update it if needed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25959</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=25959"/>
				<updated>2015-06-30T20:09:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Davenpoj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus?  How is this different from APS kit lenses?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Davenpoj</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>